Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

Add basic MEP elements. fixtures. electrical panels. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. electrical. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing engineering workflows. and plumbing fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. such as duct. and piping. 3 . The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add more detailed modelling elements. Germany. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.

when you add ductwork. In this exercise. After completing each exercise. On the Contents tab. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. When you install the training files as instructed. is located and accessed in the training files location. however. Create schedules. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. However. For example. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Create detail views. you learn where the training files are located. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. you can choose to save your work. NOTE Depending on your installation. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. So. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. When you open a training file. For example. and tags. Metric: files for users working with metric units. views. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Metric file names have an _m suffix. to provide a richer and more finished design. annotations. and sheets to document the project. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. You do not design entire systems. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . as well as how to open and save them. templates. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. your Training folder may be in a different location. such as templates and families.

and click Open. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.rvt.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For File name. if you open settings. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. double-click Imperial or Metric. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. 3 In the right pane. You may close the file with or without saving changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. and click the Training Files icon. For Files of type.rvt) is selected. select the folder in which to save the new file. a list of file types displays. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. verify that Project Files (*. For example. click ➤ Save As. 4 Click the training file name. the Open dialog displays. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and you can open any supported file type. scroll down.rvt and make changes. and click Save. you are prompted to save the changes. 8 If you have made changes. enter the new file name. Accessing Training Files | 5 .

6 .

the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. hence. quantities. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the hierarchy of elements. You learn the terminology. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and phases when you need it. drawings. If you move the partition. the floor or roof remains connected. and schedules required for a building project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. the parameter is one of association or connection.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. 2D and 3D view. schedules. drawing sheets. and plans. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If the length of the elevation is changed. the door retains this relationship to the partition. ■ ■ 7 . In the Revit MEP model. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. every drawing sheet. scope. In this case. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. sections. the operation of the software is parametric. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic.

They display in relevant views of the design. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. For example. levels. and electrical panels. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. tags. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. When you change something. sprinklers. tags. grids. and electrical panels. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. boilers. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. They help to describe or document the design. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. filled regions. sinks. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and keynotes are annotation elements. Examples include detail lines. and 2D detail components. sinks. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ducts. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. walls and ceilings are hosts. boilers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sprinklers. dimensions.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. ducts. For example. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and reference planes are datum elements.

Most often. North . If you can draw.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. By using a single project file. and drawings of the design. To place levels. views of the project. Often. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and types. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. floors. The project file contains all information for the building design. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. for example. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. such as roofs. first floor. schedules. or bottom of foundation. This information includes components used to design the model. and so forth). In Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. However. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. programming is not required. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. section views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. elevation views. and ceilings. families. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. you can explicitly control them. from geometry to construction data. For example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In other cases. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Project: In Revit MEP. top of wall. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you must be in a section or elevation view.

although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. For example. each in-place family contains only a single type. and similar graphical representation. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. System families include ducts. hiding. Then experiment with them. For example. showing. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. A type can be a specific size of a family. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. However. and wires. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. pipes. A type can also be a style. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. identical use. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. With a few clicks. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. System families can be transferred between projects. Unlike system and standard component families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Type: Each family can have several types. You can also display several project views at one time.

or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. To return the panel to the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.

then select what you want to modify. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and settings. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.. data and systems. tools used for editing existing elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and CAD files. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.. project and system parameters. architect-specific tools. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. select the tool first. and for switching views. tools used for running analysis on the current design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.

The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. By default. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. displays frequently used tools. when adding duct.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides access to common tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. provides requested information. To keep a panel expanded.

(Export) On the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. click.. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a file to open.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Open) save the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. such as Export and Publish.

family. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . click. Camera... (Publish) print the current drawing. (Licensing) close the file. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. to. To enable or disable a tool item. publish the current project. family. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. annotation. annotation..On the application menu. (Print) access product and license information. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. provides views including Default 3D. and Walkthrough. or template file. saves a current project.. but is not enabled by default. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.

To show the Status Bar again. displaying the same information. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. This displays the command history in a list. When you are using a command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Starting with the most recent command. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). or the Family Editor. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Modify. check the Status Bar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To hide the Status Bar. However. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Clipboard. workshared components.To undo or redo a series of operations. In addition. when you switch to another editing mode. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. When you are highlighting an element or component. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. repeat the command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Group. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.

It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type. Place a Wall. select one or more elements of the same category. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. When you place an element in a drawing. On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. click (Modify). for example.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example.rvt. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click ➤ Open. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. There are several ways to access zoom options. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. Zoom the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. In the following steps. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. on the Navigation bar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. If you do not have a wheel mouse. In the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Modifying the View | 19 . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click . When you release the mouse button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. NOTE As you zoom in and out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. To modify or add snap increments. 6 Click in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

For more information about SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. ➤ Options. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. moving the wheel to the desired location. 14 To exit the wheel. Click and drag to orbit the design. and then using the Zoom tool again. As you move the mouse. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and click tin the Options dialog. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press ESC. 11 Click and hold the mouse button.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and select the duct. bottoms. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design. and open Level 2 . display along the ends. Small blue dots. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. as shown. These are the drag controls. Similar controls. called drag controls. 2 Enter ZR.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. After you are familiar with these tasks.

Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the Undo command. on the Standard toolbar. Move. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. select the first item in the list. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. or press CTRL+Z. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. In this example. All changes you make to a project are tracked. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct.3 Click and drag the bottom control.

and drag it to the left as shown. for example. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. click to specify the starting position. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this case. After selecting the element to move. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . such as Move and Copy. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. Some commands.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

13 To end a command. Click OK. such as the Modify Ducts command.End a command Some commands. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 14 Enter VG. Press ESC twice. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Supply. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Select Mechanical .Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . For example.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

such as ducts and pipes. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as the default project units and settings. 6 Click OK.rte template. settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Finally. and loadable families. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. and click Open.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 27 . link files. and geometry from the starting template. such as coordination review and interference checking. you learn how to start a project from a template. You can choose from several templates. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Browse. select Project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. use copy/monitor. and modify system settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. under Template file. the default building levels and standard views. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You can either select a template from the template library. 5 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. New projects inherit all the families. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. click Training files. create and manage views. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. system families. In that case. under Create new.

Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. create another new project using the Construction template. and open North. NH. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you can establish settings that are common to most projects.7 In the Project Browser. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. for City. 8 In the drawing area. click Browse. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. For example.rte template and click Open. Click Cancel. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Choose Template dialog. review the construction materials listed. (Browse). Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. For Location. select Project template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. select Level 1. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. ■ ■ Under Create new. navigate to Imperial Templates. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. Click OK twice. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. ■ For Building Construction. for Energy Data. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. If you want to use a template other than the default. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select School or University. When you select the material. you can select it now. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. under Energy Analysis. click (Browse). 10 Using the same method. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Manchester. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Edit.

click Wiring. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. wiring. 4 1/2". 5 1/2". plumbing. for 3 1/2". For Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Identity Data. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and 12 1/2". For Categories. and fire protection systems. and 5 1/2". Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. click Round. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 24 In the right pane. under Pipe Settings. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and click Open. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. power distribution systems. 10 1/2". 23 In the left pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings. for 3 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Click OK twice. 26 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 3/4". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 22 In the right pane. 25 In the left pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. piping. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 11 1/2". Holding CTRL.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Sizes. 33 Click OK. click Rectangular. select Views. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. After standard settings have been established for an organization.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 4 1/2". 27 Click OK. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. and demand factors for electrical systems. under Duct Settings.

Click Open. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Then by. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. select Auto . 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 5 Click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. select View Name. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. under Create new. select Family and Type. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. sheets. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. click Training. To enable this coordination. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Select Ascending Click OK twice. For Then by. and groups that are contained in a project. From the Positioning list. click Browse. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 2 In the New Project dialog. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.Origin to Origin. Linking Projects In this exercise. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Sub-Discipline. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You need to create the MEP model for the project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. In addition. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. under Template file. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. For Sort by. select Associated Level. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Project. families.rvt. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 38 Close the file. Notice that the file is saved as a template. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click Open. or families. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 15 Under Library Name. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click (Browse). templates. ➤ Open. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save. and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click (Add Value). click the My Library icon. Load. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and select it as the library path. and click OK twice. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.11 In the Places dialog. and change the name to My Library.

such as bump maps. 3 Under Settings. and decal image files. 9 In the text editor. custom color files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . select Ignore words in uppercase. 20 Click ➤ Options. click OK. specify the new location here. 27 Click OK. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. view the current path. 19 Click Cancel. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 14 Click in the drawing area. 2 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click Edit. 11 In the Options dialog. If you want to relocate this path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 In the text editor. 22 Select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click Edit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Places. click the Spelling tab. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you work in a large office. This path is determined during installation. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 21 On the File Locations tab.

As you zoom in and out within a view. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it.rte. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. delete sheetmtl-CU. click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. and enter 1 .17 In the Spelling dialog. 23 In the text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Dimension Snaps. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click the Spelling tab. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. you modify snap settings. you modify snap increments. 24 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Browse. click Edit. click Restore Defaults. click Close. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. 22 In the text editor. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Template file. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. work with snapping turned off. 20 Under Settings.

such as ZO to zoom out. zoom out until it does so. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not.7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This is the increment that you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. enter SM. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Snaps dialog. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. deselect Chain. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. For example. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. TIP To zoom while sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.

. it will snap to the endpoints. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 26 Close the file. and delete the value 1’ . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. with or without saving it. the midpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and specify the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that snapping is once again active. 19 Enter SM. 25 Click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

you design a mechanical system for an office building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This system consists of a cooling tower. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. go to http://www.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you will understand the process. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. By following the recommended workflow. However. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. In this lesson. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. In this exercise. 45 . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you create the mechanical system. you can choose to save your work. At the end of the tutorial. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. If the tutorial training files are not present. you first configure the linked architectural model.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. methodology. you first plan the system. water source heat pump (WSHP). After finishing each exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.autodesk. and then you create a plenum level. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment.

make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Next. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. under Constraints.Space Plan is highlighted. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. and after the linked model highlights. click to select it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you add a level for plenums. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click OK. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Room Bounding. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. In this section. click Training Files. ceilings. roof. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. NOTE When working with a linked file.rvt. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. not in the MEP training file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties.MEP. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.6 In the Project Browser. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Click Plan View Types. For Offset. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and double-click West . ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click OK. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. enter 8'. The new level is placed. and in the Plan View Types dialog. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 9 On the Draw panel. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Preparing Spaces | 47 . 16 Press Esc. and enter Level 2 Plenum.

NOTE After finishing each exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. select Design. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In the next exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. However. for View Scale. for Top.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Under Extents. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. select Level Above (Level 3).Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Level. and click Properties. click Edit. Under Identity Data. for Default View Template. you place spaces in areas of the building model. and click Apply Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline. For View Classification. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and for Offset.Plenum. enter an Offset of 1' 0". In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Under View Depth. For Cut plane. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. ■ Click OK twice. for View Range. you can choose to save your work. right-click Level 2 Plenum. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum Plan. select MEP . This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter 0.

Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. and ceilings). For (Tag Location). indicating that it’s the active view. For Offset. For Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For Upper Limit. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. walls. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Horizontal. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Placing Spaces | 49 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select New. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ensuring coordination between the files. For Name. 14 In the drawing area. for Number. enter 219. enter Library. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.7 Click to place the space. 9 Select the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Level 3. and then click Modify. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Spaces | 51 . enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Upper Limit. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. you place a space in a large corridor area. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK.

click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and for Offset. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. and then press Esc. enter 0. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. for Upper Limit. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar.

8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and scroll to the newly placed space. enter Corridor. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. In the schedule. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 11 Close the schedule view. which was numbered 219Q. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. change the space number to 216A. as shown.7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the floor plan. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 Using the same method. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. double-click the space name. and press Enter. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.

and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. you place a space in a chase. If necessary. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select the space. 10 In the plan view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. for Upper Limit. 12 Click in the section view. right-click. and click Element Properties. enter 0. 6 Enter VG. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. On the Options Bar. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. For Offset. Under Identity Data. click in the chase area to place the space. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. For Limit Offset. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Number. select Roof Level.4 Press Esc. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . and then click OK. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter Chase. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. enter 4'. for Upper Limit. In the plan view. expand Spaces. select Interior and Reference. select Level 3. for Name. enter 225PC.

17 Type ZF.Bounding elements (such as walls. In the next exercises. 15 Press Esc. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. All spaces in the view are tagged. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Space Plan. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and maximize the view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. under Loaded Tags. floors. select Space Tag With Volume. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. ceilings. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.

The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. click Training Files. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. which removes the space from the Default zone. To display space reference lines. click View ➤ Zones. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Notice that Default is currently the only zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone.rvt. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.

you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. The Zone tool is active. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the Edit Zone tab displays. 4 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Energy Analysis. To display space reference lines. select Occupiable. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you assign spaces to zones in the building. under Spaces. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and click OK. and verify the zones in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. Instruction 221. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you can add or remove a space from the zone. you assign spaces to a zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click 121 Cafeteria. and Electrical 220 spaces. select Computer Lab 222. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and a new zone is created. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. As you do this. click Reference. and click Finish Editing Zone. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. click Training Files. Using the Edit Zone tab.rvt. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.5 In the System Browser. and modify the zone properties. Next. The graphic in the System Browser updates. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you need to activate the zone visibility. type VG. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. To view the zone in the drawing area. Instruction. Expand HVAC Zones. select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 5 With the drawing area active. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.In the System Browser. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. expand 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Area B. for Name.rvt.Zoning is highlighted.West .West . 11 Close the System Browser. To display space reference lines. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. 9 In the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You activated zone visibility in the views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Finish Editing Zone. click Training Files. and click OK. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Identity Data. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. enter 2 . and verify the zone in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Zoning. click Reference. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.

15 Press Esc.Zoning floor plan. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . Select Attached End. click in the Level 2 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view to activate it. zoom out.Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.5 Click in the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.

17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.Zoning to make it the active view. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. enter Lounge .Zoning view. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. click the corner where the Top. you verify the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Front. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click Level 1 . for Name Value. on the ViewCube. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and zone information. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. click Training Files. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and click OK. double-click the zone tag. space. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.East. In this exercise.

NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Click (Highlight). verify that Wireframe is selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Next. Using the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. and select 109 Lounge. With 109 Lounge selected. click (Isolate). ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

and click OK. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Electrical Loads.■ On the Details tab. click . click . Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. Below the list of spaces and zones. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. the space information displays for the selected space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. scroll down in the left pane. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. select 1_South_Lounge. For People. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Construction Type. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and then click OK. and then click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select 109 Lounge. click . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and in the People dialog. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. ■ ■ ■ Next.

verify that <Building> is selected.00 °F : 90. heating air temperature. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that 74.00 °F : N/A is specified. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that 70. For Heating Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. This indicates the outdoor air per person. roofs. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and other room-bounding components. floors. This indicates the heating set point. For Cooling Information. cooling air temperature.00 °F : 54. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. outdoor air per area. and air changes per hour.00 °F : N/A is specified.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. and dehumidification set point. and humidification set point. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the cooling set point. Next. click (Shading). 12 Using the methods learned previously. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.

it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Level 3. click Cancel. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Energy Analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. For Name. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. enter 212P. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Offset. 15 In the Project Browser. Under Energy Analysis. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. for Number. Click OK. Modify space properties 19 Select the space.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. select Plenum. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Because this is an unoccupied space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. open MEP .

3 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click Level 2 . is selected. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and select space Plenum 212P. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. for City. In this exercise. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. click Training Files. NH. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. for Energy Data. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click in the Value field. under Energy Analysis. enter 03101. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and zone information. space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. For Postal Code. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and verify that the space has replaced the void. For Location. verify that Manchester. On the Place tab. select School or University.Space Plan. click Edit. you verified building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i.

■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. for Values. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. for Values. enter 150 Btu/h. and click Element Properties. verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that New Construction is selected. select Heated and cooled. For Sensible. select Specified. 8 In the drawing area. right-click. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). ■ On the Weather tab. For Building Construction. If. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. For Export Complexity. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 1' 0" is specified. Select Area per person. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and click OK. both. For Condition Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Sliver Space Tolerance. In order to select a space. select space Library 219. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Project Phase. this option adjusts the times automatically. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and enter 50 sq. enter 200 Btu/h. verify that Level 1 is selected. a cooling load. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Building Service. ft. and then click . select Specified. and click OK. For Latent. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. you need to select this option.Audio Visual. select Library . or neither. verify that <Building> is specified. and click OK. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Space Type. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. under Volume Computations. For Ground Plane.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. click in the Value column. For People. Click OK twice.

There should be no warnings displayed. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . is specified. and under Heating Information. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. select Actual. and click to learn the cause for the warning. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. For Building Construction. click Calculate. 12 Click the Details tab. Next. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Location. and click OK. Under Power. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and can be modified here. For Electrical Loads. verify that <Building> is specified. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify that Manchester. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Information). Click OK twice. click Edit. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. for Values. You have verified the building information. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that School or University is selected. NH. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Actual.■ ■ ■ Click OK. For Building Service. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select 219 Library. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. You should correct the space error in the building model. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.

19 In the drawing area. 3 In the drawing area. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. For Color Scheme.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. space. and zone information for the building model. 16 After you review the loads report. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. select HVAC Zones. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. under Energy Analysis. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 15 Review the loads report for project. In this exercise.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and a loads report displays. or zone information. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. weather. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. click Training Files. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . or make any changes to the model. Click OK.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 21 Click OK. 17 In the loads report. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Space Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select 219 Library.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . The new scheme displays in the view. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select Tonnage Range. under Schemes. in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. select the color scheme legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 11 Using the method learned previously.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In this exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt. enter Space Airflow Schedule.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Name. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. select New Construction. select Spaces. In the next exercise. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. for Select available fields from. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. For Phase. Click OK. more category options are available. Select Schedule building components.Space Fill is the active view.

the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Level. select Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter Airflow Delta. Click OK. select Level. click (Browse). Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. For Fields. For Type.■ Under Available fields. Header. For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Fields dialog. for Formula. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Select Formula. and click OK. In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. ■ Click Calculated Value. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and then select Hidden field. For Formula. select HVAC. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Then by. select Number. select Not Between. and then click Conditional Format. select Air Flow. and then click . select Airflow Delta. and Blank line. enter . Select Ascending.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. In the Color dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . verify that Show is highlighted. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. ■ The schedule displays. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In this exercise. right-click to access schedule properties. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. In later exercises. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. Under Conditions to Use. a view opens that contains the selected space. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. For Background Color. select red. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Click OK twice. and click OK. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.■ ■ ■ For Value. click the color swatch. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.

78 .

IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After system creation. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you will create supply air systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. As you place the air terminals. After completing the air systems lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). 79 . and work with the airflow schedule. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you modify air terminal parameters. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process.

3 In the ceiling view. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.rvt. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and scroll to space 223. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

17 Move the cursor down.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. which in this case is the ceiling grid. select the diffuser. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then select both Copy and Multiple.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. type 12. the hosted elements are updated as well. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.Rectangular Face Round Neck . If the host element is modified or moved. as shown. click Place on Face. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and press Enter. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. enter 425 CFM.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. verify that Constrain is cleared. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and then press Esc to end the command. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. and select Supply Diffuser . and press Enter. for Flow. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 9 On the Placement panel. 15 On the Options Bar. Also. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.

clear Leader. 22 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 Place 2 diffusers. Next. select one of the diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. 25 In the drawing area. 21 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Placement tab. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and click Open. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. 27 Select Return Diffuser .Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. as shown. click Place on Face. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. As you place the return diffusers. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag.rfa. click Yes. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.

and click OK. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and click to select the lines. for Reference. select Strong Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select one of the return diffusers. click Yes. Level. under Other. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. as shown. 31 In the alert dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 In the Project Browser.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. ■ ■ For the end point. For the start point.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. and click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click the Level 1 line. for Constraints ➤ Offset. enter 9' 0"2750.

verify that Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the title. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. When you highlight a space. the space crossing lines display. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Press Esc. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . After creating the logical connection. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. including energy analysis. You then create the logical connection between the system components. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and click View ➤ Systems. However.

12 In the System Browser. and Flow value. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Connect Into. 11 In the drawing area. 15 Click Cancel. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. review the Number of Elements. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. System Name. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. As you add diffusers to systems. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. the number of elements is updated. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. On the Options Bar. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled.

highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 18 Click OK. which updates the name in the System Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. under Mechanical. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Rename the system Next. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the air terminals are the children. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 25 Click OK.17 Using the method learned previously. for Mark. 22 Click OK. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and the system connects them. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. In this exercise.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. click Training Files. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select the upper left diffuser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . Also. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the drawing area. 5 On the Options Bar. the Network type provides several solutions. A Generate Layout tab displays. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select Network. the space crossing lines display. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. which provides various layout tools. for Solution Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt. and display solution 1. In this case.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Plan. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design is highlighted.

WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.Round. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For Flex Duct Type. Select Branch.7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. enter 3'. For Offset. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For Offset. For Duct Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. as shown. click Settings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Duct Type. Click OK. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 9' 10 1/2".

Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the duct. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.11 Click Finish Layout.

15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and then click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. a disconnection exists. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. If the entire network does not highlight. highlight a segment of the main duct. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Using a flow-based color scheme. but not all values are used in this view. fittings. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Usually. select By View. and click OK. select Duct Color Fill . press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. for Color Scheme. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. thus it is not part of the system. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. under Graphics. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and click to select it. for Values Displayed. The first time you press Tab. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.Flow. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection.

decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 20 In the drawing area. under Mechanical . Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select one of the diffusers in the system. 26 Click OK. for Flow. for Schemes. select Duct Color Fill . note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select the WSHP. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and press Enter. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.Velocity.

If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select the upper segment of main duct. and select 16".Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Calculated Size Only.08 in-wg/100ft. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. and then click to select it. and drag it to the right. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Click OK. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. click Cancel. Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. select Friction. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Only. and enter . highlight a segment of the duct.

so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. static pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Using this tool. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Use the information that displays (flow.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). pressure. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.

also known as the critical path. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 35 Click Finish.NOTE As you inspect a system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click Training Files.

and select the WSHP. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .Design is highlighted.

Front. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. NOTE When drawing duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click the corner where the Top. and click Draw Duct. select 9' 10 1/2".8 Press Esc twice to end the command. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset.3D MEP. select the top right diffuser. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. right-click the connector grip. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 15 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. double-click MEP . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created. Also. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it is considered a closed loop. in space 115. 22 Using the same method. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

You can ignore the warning.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 25 Press Esc.

and click to select it. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.

36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.Airflow. and then click OK. under Constraints. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click OK. such as a plenum. under Mechanical . clear Restrict Height. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. select a segment of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. for Flow. 40 Using the same method.

Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Automatically and manually lay out piping. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. including 2 base mounted pumps. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. 109 .Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Then. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof.

click Training Files. on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.HVAC Plan . in corridor 328.Left Return .Design is highlighted. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 7 On the Options Bar.High Efficiency . verify that Wall faces is selected.2-6 Tons . indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select WSHP .Horizontal .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

8 Click the corridor wall face. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. click the top edge of the WSHP. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 10 Select the WSHP. and enter 2'. and click to place the dimension. as shown.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector. as shown. click the dimension. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. as shown. select the 2 WSHPs. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Offset. enter 9'. for Water Flow. enter 12 GPM. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down.14 Click Modify. Under Mechanical. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

21 Click Modify. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the return and supply piping systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create the logical connection between the system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

analyses cannot be performed.Design is highlighted. but without a corresponding system. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. indicating that it’s the active view.Mech 330). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Unlike logical connections (systems).rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 In the System Browser. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Creating a Piping System | 115 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create pipes to connect system components. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and click View ➤ Piping. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. where it is easier to review the information.

and the Edit System tool is not active. This display indicates that the system is selected. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select the 2 WSHPs. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that on the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Assigning a system component to an existing system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. select the boiler. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 12 In the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Therefore. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 10 On the Options Bar. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. for System Name. As you assign equipment to systems. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.

Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 19 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and select the cooling tower. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. You have created the hydronic return system. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating a Piping System | 117 .HVAC Plan . for System Name. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. double-click Roof . under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.Design.

and click Expand All. 29 Right-click CHWS. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Select. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and bypasses the cooling tower. 28 Using the same method. indicating the logical connection. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 23 Close the roof plan view. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 26 Click Finish Editing System. In cooling mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In heating mode. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 25 Select the boiler. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.22 In the Select Connector dialog. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.

including the flow rate and size of the component. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. for Water Flow. and click OK. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click Column Settings. under Mechanical.In the System Browser. and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You also manually modify the layout path as required. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Properties. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. enter 18 GPM. you can view several parameters. expand Piping. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.

The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Check None.HVAC plan view range are highlighted.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .HVAC Plan . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). indicating that it’s the active view. When you draw a box to select components. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click to select it. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click OK.Mech 330). press Tab to highlight the system. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). select Mechanical Equipment. you can place the cursor over a system component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A system preview displays in red. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 10 Click OK. 5 In the Filter dialog. the boiler. then the Select a System dialog displays. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select CHWR. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 9 In the Select a System dialog.

enter 1' 6''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architectural components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 14 On the Generate Layout tab. structural beams. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. verify that Solutions is selected. duct. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 13 Click Cancel. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. select Perimeter. click Settings. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset.

122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and the flow for the other is 12. and press Tab 3 times. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. to display the path with thinner lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.16 Click Finish Layout. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. With each Tab. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 17 Optionally. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 19 In the drawing area.

notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 22 Select the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Press Esc.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . On the Options Bar. Next. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. you physically close the CHWR loop. 28 In the Project Browser. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 27 On the System Tools panel. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).Design ➤ Floor Plans. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. double-click Level 1 . click Edit System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Logically.Design.HVAC Plan . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Number of Elements is now 8.

and click Cancel. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. access its instance properties. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. select a WSHP. under Mechanical. as shown. 38 Using the same method. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 35 Using the drag control.

40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Inset. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click Settings. enter 0''/12''. enter 1' 6''. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Slope. 41 Click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select CHWS. and then click OK.

48 While pressing Ctrl. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. In a later exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .

or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. Add piping to close the supply loop. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.50 Using the same method. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Either relocate the system components. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect.

HVAC Plan . click Training Files. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.Design is highlighted.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . As you work in the training file. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.rvt. and the return pipes are magenta. double-click 3D HVAC Building. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. as shown. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. select the boiler. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .

and the lower one is secondary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 13 In the plan view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The connections are automatically created. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and click Draw Pipe. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 12 In the 3D view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click OK. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the return pipe riser. select the boiler.

■ Move the cursor down. enter 2'. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.7''. for Offset. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.In a plan view. enter 1' . Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and you select 1 connector.

and click OK. select the primary base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Press Esc twice.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. as shown. 19 In the plan view. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. As you place piping runs that are close together. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and select it. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. click to connect to the pump. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. you select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and when the connector point displays. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the bottom connector. and click the minus symbol. 29 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 4'.

35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. as shown. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. type 1'. enter 9' 6''. and click Draw Pipe. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

right-click. You now have a closed loop system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. and click Element Properties.

47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click Cancel. as shown.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you create the pumps in parallel. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the cooling tower. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). and click OK. the value is 0 GPM. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. view the properties for the secondary pump. and click Element Properties. for Cooling Water Flow.50 or 50% of the Flow. notice that under Mechanical. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 42 Click OK. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . Connect the cooling tower Next. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 46 Press Esc. under Mechanical. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 41 Using the same method. 44 In the 3D view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 48 In the plan view. 43 Press Esc. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. right-click.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. select the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 In the 3D View. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). and is heated by the boiler. When the valve is open.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. The bypass valve is closed by default. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. as shown. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Adding Valves | 143 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Press Esc twice. and select Ball Valve . indicating that it’s the active view.

13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. parallel to the previously placed valve. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.

In heating mode. and click OK. Adding Valves | 145 . 20 Select the bypass valve. right-click.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Using the same method. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. under Mechanical.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and select Ball Valve . verify that Flow is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.22 Using the method you just learned. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Initially. as shown. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted.

Flow. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click OK. Sizing Pipe | 147 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Schemes. and click OK.Size. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

25 FT/100ft. and for Velocity.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Click OK. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Under Constraints. and enter 2. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 13 Press Esc. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and click to select the branch. for Branch Sizing. Select And. enter 5 FPS. select Friction. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

rvt. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . or manually modify the pipe. Inspecting the System In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views. pressure. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System | 149 . you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or offset elevations are incorrect. Using the System Inspector. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Either relocate the system components.

This information helps you modify the system design. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. and pressure information including pressure loss. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as required. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. An inspection flag reports the section number.

targeting those systems that need attention. and the Pressure Loss is 1. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. as shown. and click OK. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.89 psi. 10 Click Finish. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. and to size pipe. you need to validate them. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.88 psi. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Fluid Temperature. 9 Using the same method.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.67 psi. In this exercise. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. the Static Pressure is 7. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. select 90° F.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. inspect Section 6 again.

Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. In the System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. and for pipe sizing. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. After you assign components to a system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . After you have assigned all components to systems. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.HVAC Plan .rvt. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 4 In the System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. and click Show to view all of the system components. 7 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. For example. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. If you place components without assigning them to a system. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. thus assigning the components to a system. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.Design. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 3 .HVAC Plan . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. double-click Level 1 . As you learned when placing components. and click View. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the Systems titlebar. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder.Design. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 9 Right-click CHWS. Warnings display.

right-click Hydronic Return. and select Level 3 . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 13 Right-click CHWR.Design floor plan. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and confirm unassigned system components. 10 Using the same methods. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. otherwise. 12 In the System Browser. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. click Close.TIP If you have multiple views open.HVAC Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. and click Expand All. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. click Training Files. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. distribution systems. Click OK. enter 1. For Material. You also add a wiring type. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Temperature Rating. select Copper. speeding up the design phase. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Copper.Wire Sizes. For Temperature. select 75. As you place components and create circuits. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. select Wiring Types.04. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. Select Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material. In this exercise you review electrical settings. and demand factors that are applied in the design. click (Open).rvt. ■ ■ For Factor. expand Wiring . wiring. select 90. enter THHN.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

Click Background Color. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Custom Colors. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click OK three times. select Red.■ ■ For Value.

as you place lighting fixtures. Create a panel schedule. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create power loads. Then. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Use the System Browser to check your design. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. power circuits. 167 . These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson.

3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.00 fc. click Training Files. for Basic Colors. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.00 fc. 2 In the drawing area. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . By using orange as the color for this range. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Lighting Color Fill view is open.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the color legend. for the Spaces Category. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select Orange. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Under Scheme Definition. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select the color for Less Than 20. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create additional color schemes.rvt. In the Color dialog. Click OK. click (Open). select Average Estimated Illumination.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 8 In the Project Browser. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling plan. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The red field will clear once the +/.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . zoom to space Library 219. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 13 Click the Level 2 . 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.277.5 fc range is satisfied. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.7 In the Project Browser. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.5 fc range. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.

select Multiple. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 23 Click OK. 19 Press ESC to end the command. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 18 Click to place the fixture. 25 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. the fixtures will move accordingly. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. select Multiple. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 27 Press ESC to end the command.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.

Click OK. 36 In the Filter dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .277V. and for Category.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 42 In the drawing area.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 On the Options Bar. click the ceiling grid line as shown.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . select Multiple Alignment. The lighting delta is satisfied.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. you modify the light fixture IES files.45 Press ESC to end the command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click (Open).rvt. In the next exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . 46 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.

Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . scroll to view space space Library 219.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Lighting Color Fill plan.

85. for Color Preset. Under Identity Data. select 463T5_S. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . enter F15.00 lm. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.277V and click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ Click OK twice. for Type Mark. click the value for Initial Color. specify 15000. for Apparent Load. Click OK. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ Under Photometrics. for Lamp. and click OK. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. In the Select File dialog. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ Click Apply. Under Photometrics. enter . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics. select T5 [HO]. enter 162.93.ies and click Open. Under Photometrics. click the value for Light Loss Factor. select Xenon and click OK. Under Electrical. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. In the Name dialog.00 VA. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . select Luminous Flux. enter .

Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. and for Category. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click Check None. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.277V. Click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

15 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Note the lighting delta updates again.Press Delete.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. you add switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. and Receptacles | 183 . Placing Switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Junction Boxes. click Training Files. In the next exercise. and receptacles to your design.rvt. Junction Boxes.Press Delete. junction boxes. Placing Switches.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 7 Click to place the switch.

NoLoad. The element type Junction Boxes . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Select Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open. 9 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 185 . Placing Switches.

enter JB-1NL. Click Edit Type. note the Number of Poles is 1. 21 In the drawing area. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. for Mark. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click OK twice. enter 9’0”. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Level 2 . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 15 Select the junction box. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.14 Press ESC to end the command. In the Type Properties dialog. Under Electrical. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE When entering values. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .

Space Number. Click OK. Expand General. NOTE If necessary. Junction Boxes. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Space Name. 23 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. right-click and click Column Settings. Distribution System. and Voltage. and Number of Elements. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Placing Switches. 26 In the System Browser. Select Load. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 24 For any column. Select Size. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.

31 Close the System Browser. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple. and Receptacles | 189 . Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. Junction Boxes.

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

rvt.equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click (Open). You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. zoom to the space Electrical 220.

12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Surface: 100A.Loads. enter 20. select 120/208 Wye. 7 Press ESC to end the command.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . For Panel Name. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Distribution System. for Max. 14 Select the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B.

zoom to space Instruction 221. for Max. which is the logical connection between the elements.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 20 In the drawing area. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name. #1 Pole Breakers. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Check None. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. and for Category.Loads. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter LP-2B. enter 20. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 23 In the Filter dialog. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.28 Press ESC to end the command. 32 Press ESC. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

Click OK. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire. and for Category. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Wires. click (Open). for Hot Conductors. except without wire.Loads. 41 In the Filter dialog. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Check None. enter 2.

Rating. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and verify that Load.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. right-click on the Systems heading. and then expand circuit 1. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Click OK. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. expand Power. Expand Electrical. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Voltage. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings.rvt. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 13 In the System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. click Training Files. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Distribution System. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .

20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. under Electrical. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 30 Close the System Browser. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Click OK. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 With the junction box still selected. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 47 In the drawing area. for Type Mark. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter FR4. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 40 Click OK twice. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. click Edit Type. Click Tags. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . click below the first one to place it. Click Yes. under Identity Data. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.

Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. and for Category. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Next you create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Check None. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 61 Close the file with or without saving it. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rfa. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click Save. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 56 In the Filter dialog. select Break. and click Apply. 52 In the Save As dialog.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Click OK. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for File Name. Click OK. For Circuit Number. Deselect Break and for Suffix. enter a comma. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.

6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Click OK. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter a. under Electrical Lighting. click (Open). 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. Creating a Switch System | 205 . for Switch ID. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files.

21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Click OK.Lighting. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. for switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. under Electrical .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter b. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.

click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and data systems. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and for Category. select the PP-2B panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for power. click Check None.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 7 In space Electrical 220. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select Electrical Fixtures. click Training Files. Click OK. lighting. 4 In the Filter dialog.

navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Long Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Electrical . enter 2. 13 Select the wire again. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Wiring.Loads. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 19 Click OK. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and click Element Properties. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and click Open.rfa. and in the right pane. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and in the drawing area.

Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select the PP-2B panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. and click to select the circuit. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 22 In space Electrical 220. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. as shown.

in space Instruction 221.26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 28 In the drawing area. click the connector of the first receptacle. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 In space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

3 In the Electrical space. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. click Open.rvt. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. click Training Files. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. zoom to space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. select panel LP-2B. Finally. 2 In the drawing area. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.

click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.3712 VA. Phase B 3636 VA. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 6 Click OK. enter 30A. and Phase C . and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A.3616 VA). 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 14 Close the warning dialog. Click OK. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Rebalance Loads. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. Under Electrical-Loads. for Rating. Scroll down. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 1-#12. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#10. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 1-#12. B. Notice that the loads on Phase A.

you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Select PP-2B. click (Open). 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Training Files. for Rating. enter 30A. for Rating. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. under Electrical .Loads. Next you create a panel schedule. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. Click OK.15 Select panel PP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 25A.Loads. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . 17 Close the warning dialog. and click OK. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.

Under Body Text.Panel Schedules. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Font Size. and open E601 . the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. enter 1/8. 11 Click OK twice. select Berlin Sans FB. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 7 Select the schedule. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 5 In the Project Browser. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Under Header Text. expand Sheets (all). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Edit. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Header Text. 6 In the Project Browser. for Appearance. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. click Training Files. for Font Size. under Other. for Font. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.rvt. select Bold and Italic. 4 Close the report. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click (Open). 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 3/32. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.

In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. select space Lounge 212. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. In the System Browser. press TAB once. Expand Unassigned. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Checking Your Design | 215 . each with a load of 180VA. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.

17 In the drawing area. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 20 On the Options Bar. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. for Panel. under Warnings. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. zoom to space Electrical 214. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 15 In the dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Plumbing Plan . expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. type PVC . in addition to loading existing families.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. and click OK. 4 In the Name dialog. and click Properties.Vent. 219 . 2 In the Project Browser.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Duplicate. and verify that Level 1 . In this exercise. planning is critical to a successful design. right-click PVC . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you create a PVC pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Adding a pipe size.

The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.rfa. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Branch. select Tee Reducing Double Vent .DWV.PVC . Tap. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 27 For the new pipe size. 17 In the left pane. Cross. 26 Click OK. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 25 For Outside.Sch 40 . click Training Files.PVC . enter -4' . and click Main. In the Project Browser. enter 27/32''. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .DWV: Standard. for Material. 22 Click New Size.Sch 40 . enter 5/8''. select Sanitary. select Plastic.Vent is listed. select Sanitary.0''. For Offset. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Tee. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Pipe Settings. click Modify. 15 For System Type. select None. under Pipe Types. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. for Nominal.Sch 40 . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 In the right panel. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 6 Click OK. enter 1/2''. select Tee. under Mechanical.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 For Inside Diameter. and click OK. select Tee Vent . enter 10°. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.PVC . 18 For System Type. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.DWV: Standard. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 21 In the right pane. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 10 On the Selection panel.

add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. sanitary piping. and hot and cold water piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the cold water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. including plumbing fixtures. 221 . and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . including the men’s room (space Male 107). click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. NOTE To identify a space name and number. you add 2 toilets. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. as shown. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. 1 urinal.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.1. and 3 sinks. in the Type Selector. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. as shown.Wall Mounted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 5 On the Placement panel.6 gpf. 4 On the Element panel. against the left wall. under Water Closet .Flush Valve . select Public . 1 wall-mounted urinal. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .

use the reference line to center the fixture. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again.Wall Hung. above the first in the standard toilet space.7 Click to place another toilet. under Urinal . and press Esc.) 8 Press Esc. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.

you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. under Floor Drain .Rectangular. In placing the fixture. 12 On the Placement panel. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 14 Click Modify. click Place on Face.2'' Drain.

a urinal. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and review the components listed under this system. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and Default Domestic Cold Water. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. click Training Files. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. and a floor drain. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 16 Click the title bar for the browser.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click OK. 6 In the plan view. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 8 In the Filter dialog. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Design is open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 .

All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. for System Name. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. If you deselected the drain. expand Sanitary. click Finish Editing System. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter Sanitary 107. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 13 In the Systems Browser.

Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. A preview of the piping layout displays. select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. a toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK. as shown. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example. select Sanitary 107.

25 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''.19 On the Options Bar. select Branch. 21 On Options Bar. select Main. click Solutions. enter -4'-0”. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You accept this suggested solution. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and for Offset. enter -1' 0''. and modify it to meet project requirements. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Slope. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Intersections. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 27 Click Modify. The default settings are automatically modified. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Offset. and click Settings. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. and click OK. select 4''. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 24 In the left pane. for Diameter. for Solution Type.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view.30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Design is open. 5 On the Placement panel. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Public.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). under Lavatory . in the Type Selector. select 22''x22'' .Rectangular.Plumbing Plan .rvt. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.

and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. 8 Select the sink. For example. TIP When entering dimensions. select Multiple. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. enter 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line.

12 In the drawing area.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Add To System. click Finish Editing System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 11 In the System Browser. Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Click the 3 sinks. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and press Enter to create the third sink. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 16 On the Edit System panel.

In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 22 In the plan view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. as shown. double-click 3D Plumbing. with the tee fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .

and click Apply. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. for Offset.6''. In this example. 24 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. press Spacebar. enter 2' . 27 Click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Slope.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. select Standard. under Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV. and when the vertical center line displays.Sch 40 . click to place the fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 30 In the 3D view.PVC . 31 Click Modify.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector.

for Offset. double-click the section head to open the section view. 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. zoom in to the double wye fitting. right-click the right connector. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 1'. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. on the Options Bar. enter 6''. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected.

41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. as shown.

right-click the bottom connector. press Spacebar. 46 In the section view.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 48 Click Modify. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Esc. enter 6''. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 49 Using the same method.

54 Click Modify. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 55 In the 3D view. 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . under Trap P . 56 Using the same method. 53 Using the same method. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.DWV.PVC . select Standard. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. enter 6''. select the left P-Trap. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor to the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click in the plan view.. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify.

under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select a proposed solution.■ In the 3D view. select PVC Sanitary. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Press Esc. On the Routing Solutions panel. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. as shown. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. In the Type Selector.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. click Training Files. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. adjusting the sanitary stack. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Finish. for Slope. and verify the slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 62 On the Options Bar.

2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. as shown. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 7 On the Selection panel.Design.DWV. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the elbow fitting on the right. 3 In the Section view. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the vertical stack. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. click Modify. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design.Sch 40 . and click the intersection to place the fitting.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the 3D view. select Standard.Floor level line.PVC . right-click the top connector.Overall. and click to draw the pipe. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

enter 1'-0”.PVC . as shown. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . 15 Press Esc. 13 Click the rotate control once. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. 18 In the plan view.11 Click Modify. select Standard. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .DWV. under Plug . 12 Select the fitting. for Offset. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. and click the rotate control to change the orientation.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify that Level 1 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .19 Click Modify.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open.rvt. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.

enter 9' 3''. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. urinal. verify that the value is 9' 0''. double-click 3D Plumbing . (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. click Check None. and click OK.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Plumbing Fixtures. select Main. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 17 In the Filter dialog. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Pipe Types: Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 15 In the plan view. expand Unassigned. select Domestic Cold Water. and sinks. 4 In the right pane. select Domestic Hot Water. 6 In the left pane. draw a selection box to select the toilets. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. under Design ➤ Plumbing . for System Type. select Branch. For Offset.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Types: Water.) 10 Click OK. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 9 In the left pane. for System Type. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 14 In the System Browser. minimize the Sanitary system. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 7 In the left pane. if necessary. and for System Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system.Overall. and click Main. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Domestic Hot Water. For Offset. select Branch.Design ➤ 3D Views. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog.

click Finish Editing System. 19 On the System Tools panel. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. For Flow Conversion Method. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. click Edit System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. In the System Browser. 21 On the Edit System panel. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . enter DCW 107. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view.

under Pipe Types. as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. enter 7''. and press Enter. 35 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter.2 7/8''. For Offset. and click the connector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 30 In the plan view. for Offset. enter 4'0”. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and click to place the pipe. select 3/4''. select Water. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. right-click the top DCW connector. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe.25 Using the same method. enter 3' . press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. enter 0”/12”. select the sink above the urinal. enter 10'. as shown. click to the left of the urinal. For Slope. 33 Click Modify. 28 In the Type Selector. 34 In the plan view. connect the second toilet. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

and click to connect to the main cold water line. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left. 41 Select the top sink. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 40 Click Modify. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click OK. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).

44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Design is open. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. 6 In the plan view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Overall. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select the 3 sinks. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. and verify that Level 1 .rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . expand the Unassigned folder. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. click Training Files. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. Default Domestic Hot Water. as shown.6 Gallon. Default Domestic Cold Water. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. and click Edit System.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. for System Name. 10 In the System Browser. In later steps. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. verify that DCW 107 is selected. you edit the system to add equipment. select 0.Tankless. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Water Heater . 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 15 In the System Browser. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. in the Unassigned folder. 14 Click Modify. 13 In the plan view.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. When designing systems.

and on the Edit System panel. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . select the water heater.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and press Enter. enter 10’. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the water heater. 26 Move the cursor to the right. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and click the water main line. 24 Move the cursor up. Slope: 0''/12''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. click Finish Editing System. as shown. Offset: 4' 6''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and select Draw Pipe. 25 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. enter 1' 6''. 27 Click Modify. right-click the middle left connector. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. for Offset.

29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and for Offset. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 36 Move the cursor down. for Diameter. and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor to the right. select 4'-6''. enter 1' 6''. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1''. select a sink. and in the System Selector. 37 On the Options Bar. as shown. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Offset. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 9' 0''. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 33 On the Edit System panel. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. click Finish Editing System. click Edit System. and on the Placement Tools panel.

as shown. 42 Click Modify. enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. for Offset. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor down. enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink.

262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

267 .Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.autodesk. you can choose to save your work. In this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. However. click Training Files. go to http://www. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 2 Right-click Standard. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and click Duplicate. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You create a new pipe type. In this lesson.

Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For System Type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. In this exercise. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 6 In the Project Browser. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. For System Type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For Offset. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. In the next exercise. select Main. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is selected. Next. under Mechanical.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 9 Click OK. and enter Fire Protection Wet. In the left pane. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. or architectural components. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for Material. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. and click Properties. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. click Rename. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. However. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. structural beams. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Offset. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Carbon Steel. select Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. duct. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.

the space crossing lines display. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 8 Using a crossing window. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor. For Group parameter under. 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1. select space Instruction 221 as shown.Fire Protection Plan . select the upper half of the building. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and then click OK. select Fire Protection.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. for Sprinkler Zone. Under Categories.Design is highlighted. under Fire Protection. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter Sprinkler Zone. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. right-click. click Add. for Name. 6 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Spaces.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

rvt. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and then click OK. 13 Using the same method. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. including a calculated value parameter. to which you add various parameters. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Fire Protection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. you create schedules for sprinkler design. for Sprinkler Zone. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then access instance properties. 10 In the Filter dialog. select Zone 1. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. enter Zone 2. and click OK. click Training Files. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK.

For Type of Parameter. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click on each column separator. 6 Using the same method. In the Maximum Spacing column.Fire Protection Plan . For Key name.Design is highlighted. enter 15. 9 On the Formatting tab. for Name. select Feet and fractional inches. click the Formatting tab. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Select Schedule keys. For Rounding. For Units. The schedule displays. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. and on the ribbon. 10 In the Format dialog. 11 Click OK twice. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select Fire Protection. enter Maximum Spacing. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Obstructed-Combustible. For Name. indicating that it’s the active view.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Group parameter under. Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. 14 Select the new header. select To the nearest 1'. select Length. enter Protection Area Construction Type. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. click Add Parameter. enter Light. Click OK. select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click Field Format. 7 Click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.

Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and press Enter. under Available fields. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. For Name. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Click OK. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. enter 130. 16 Using the same method. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column.

and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and click OK. under Other. and click View Properties. Click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Then by. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Level. select Number. for Sort by. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click Field Format. select Sprinkler Zone. select Common. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Fixed. click Edit. 22 Click OK twice. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. enter Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Formula. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Rounding. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Area. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Fields dialog. For Units. click . select 0 decimal place. For Discipline. For Type.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Enter the formula operator / after Area. Select Header and Blank line. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

select Level equals Level 2. for Filter.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. 26 Click OK 3 times. and select Totals only. For Fields. 27 In the drawing area. At the bottom of the dialog. ■ In the Format dialog. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Number. 30 Click OK twice. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Sprinkler Zone. and then select Hidden field. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . right-click the schedule. click Edit. select Level. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. Under Field formatting. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Field Format. For Then by (second instance). On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Grand totals. select Hidden field. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Filter by. For Fields.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sprinklers. select Grand totals. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. System Name. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Available fields. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Fields. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Count. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. double-click Type. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . Under Field formatting. delete the word Maximum. select Calculate totals. select Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. under Other. and select Totals only. For Category. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. click Edit. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. for Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and Count. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and click View Properties.

use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 46 With the space still selected. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Unobstructed. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 43 Click Cancel. under Identity Data. 50 Access the instance properties. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 41 In the plan view. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. select Light.Fire Protection Plan Design. 48 In the floor plan. and click OK. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result. 52 Click OK. select Ordinary.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. double-click FP . for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. but their values are not determined. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Ordinary. select space 221 Instruction. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select space 221 Instruction. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 44 In the schedule. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. and access the instance properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. At the end of this tutorial. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. As you create the system. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. go to http://www. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. By following the recommended workflow. If the tutorial training files are not present. click Training Files. you will understand the process. As you place the sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. and double-click Level 2 . methodology. 279 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. After finishing each exercise. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you can choose to save your work.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . After placing the initial sprinkler. When this happens. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.

because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. as shown. 11 In the drawing area. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Sprinkler . and click to place 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Pendent . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. while pressing Ctrl. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.

and then press Esc. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Also. as shown. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. verify that Constrain is cleared.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 13 On the Options Bar.

and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 29 Press Esc. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Notice that the schedule updates. and press Enter. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. under Constraints.Design. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 17 In the Project Browser. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. enter 11. open Design ➤ FP . specify a vertical offset. move the cursor to the right. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 14' 6". 200B. enter 10' 6". 18 Type WT. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.Fire Protection Plan . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click Element Properties. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Next. For Number. you place non-hosted sprinklers. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. for Offset. you adjust the offset. This number is determined in the schedule. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. and 200C). and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 25 Click OK. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.FP_Ceiling view. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 19 In the floor plan.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and with piping (physical connection). In the next exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . After creating the logical connection. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. However. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.Fire Protection Plan . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 1 In the Project Browser. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .30 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. In this exercise.rvt. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. click Training Files. Unlike logical connections (systems).

all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Creating a Piping System | 285 . click View ➤ Systems. as shown. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. named Fire Protection Wet. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 5 Right-click the header. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and select Piping. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. within the Piping Systems folder.

Wet is selected. and number of elements in the system. and on the Options Bar. and click Select. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. click Settings. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 19 Click OK. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. providing system editing tools. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 15 In the drawing area.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. indicating the logical connection. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The Edit Piping System panel displays. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. press Tab. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and select the system. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. In the left pane. verify that Main is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. For Offset. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and a piping layout preview displays. select Branch. 13 In the System Browser. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. system equipment. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for System Name. Next. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Pipe Type. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 11 With the system still selected. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.

21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Solutions. and green represents branch lines). the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. as shown. enter -12' 0".20 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . click Place Base. select 2". 23 For Offset. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. for Diameter. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 5. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. verify that Network is selected. In general. When the layout is finished.

29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Modify. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. On the Generate Layout panel. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. A (parallel movement control) displays.

IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. and then you create piping to physically connect them. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. the Connect Into tool. or manually modify the pipe. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 32 If necessary. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. and various manual pipe creation tools. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. select a different layout solution. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design is highlighted. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom in. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 If necessary.

for Solution Type. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and so on) are logically connected by a system.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. mechanical equipment. you can select the pipe or duct. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. radiators. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. click Add To System. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. air terminals. click Finish Editing System. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. or a system component to display system tools. verify that Network is selected. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and select solution 5. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 12 On the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 5 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 9 On the Edit System panel. 14 Close the System Browser. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 8 In the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. verify that Solutions is selected.

and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and then tile the views. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 29 Using the same method.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 23 View the result in the 3D view. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . right-click. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 27 On the Options Bar. select 9'. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. for Offset. 25 Select the sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. 21 In the Piping Plan. 24 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.

32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 31 In the plan view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Because the whole system highlights.

2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 4 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 1/4" = 1'-0".Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. for Scale. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Fire Protection Plan . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. ■ 6 Press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

select 4". for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

25 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). select 1 1/4". 24 In the drawing area. 26 Using the same method. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The pipe diameter is modified. as shown. and maximize the floor plan. and then tag the piping as shown.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. For additional practice. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this tutorial. In this exercise. You added tags to pipes. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. create details.

306 .

Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. under Floor Plans.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. and apply a view template. click Training Files. and click Rename. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. matchlines. and view references. dependent views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Copy of Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. If the view included detail graphics. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click OK. right-click Level 1. and click Properties. 2 In the Project Browser.

and click Rename. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 4 Using the same method. 6 In the Project Browser. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. as shown. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 10 In the drawing area. and click OK. more focused. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 9 Click OK. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views.rvt. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. create dependent views for areas B and C. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and then press Esc. click Training Files. and click Apply Default View Template.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. views and put them on the sheet. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels.

For Line Pattern. In the Color dialog. and click OK. and then press Esc. select black. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 20 Select the upper view reference and. click the current value. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select 11. on the Options Bar. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference./ ---). click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . For Line Weight. 21 Using the same method. Click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 19 In the drawing area. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 13 Press Esc twice. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Double Dash 5/8". Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

27 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. as shown. crop the dependent views for plans B and C.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method.

enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and click Apply Default View Template.29 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 In the Project Browser. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D Plumbing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. for View Classification. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. click Training Files. Click OK. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Domestic Water. and click to select it. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select Documentation. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and select the section box.Domestic Water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing Isometric. for View Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. For Default View Template. and click Properties. select Plumbing. 2 Zoom in.rvt. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. The section crop lines no longer display. For Sub-Discipline. 4 In the Project Browser. Under Graphics.

12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. select 3. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". For Pattern. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. Click Apply. select Dash. and then click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. as shown). This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks.

On the View Control Bar. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Right-click. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.15 Press Esc. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.Domestic Water view with detailing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. In the drawing area. 18 Using methods learned previously. press Tab 3 times. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and click to select it. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. click Reveal Hidden Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.

25 Press Esc twice. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. In the Format dialog. For Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. for Rounding. click on the Format value. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 1/8". 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 21 Click OK twice. you use a plan view to create a callout view.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Callout Views | 315 . the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. verify that Common is selected. as shown. When the view is associated with a sheet. and then place the callout view on a sheet.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. for Scale. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 5 On the Options Bar.

and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. select 5. using the same method. double-click M601 . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 13 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. under Sheets (all). ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Creating Callout Views | 317 .8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

enter WSHP PART PLAN. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. for View Name. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. right-click the callout view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Title on Sheet.

Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. under Names. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 26 In the Rename View dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. right-click the detail view. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and click Rename. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK.

■ work with model-based components. 321 . symbols. linetypes. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. duct tags.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and annotation to create a legend. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.

you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Creating Annotations In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.rvt. as shown. 8 With the text still selected. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. select a supply diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click Right Straight. verify that Leader is cleared. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a return diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 323 . 16 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc twice. as shown. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

move diffuser tags off the ductwork. under Category. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.rfa. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. for Ducts. If necessary. and click OK.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. and click Open. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 17 Click Modify. 20 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Load Family dialog. click Load. clear Leader. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.

30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 325 . 26 On the Options Bar.25 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and Attached End. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Leader. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.

326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. as shown. select Free End. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

not simply an instance property. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 40 Using the method learned previously. lay out. and all elements of that type are affected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 37 In the drawing area. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. That’s because you changed a type property. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 39 In the Type Properties dialog. for Leader Arrowhead. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. select Dot Open 1/16". and click OK. and lock lighting fixtures. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.36 Press Esc twice. select the last tag placed.

click Training Files. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. select the dimension line. 12 Press Esc. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. and then select the interior face of the wall. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.rvt. On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

19 Using the same methods. 16 Press Esc. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Because the dimensions are locked. and offset them 8' from the wall. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and notes. and press Enter. Creating a Legend | 329 . Creating a Legend In this exercise. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. linework. annotation symbols. enter 8'. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.3 1/2"). the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.13 Using the same method. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.

place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select 1/4" = 1' -0". and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For Scale.8 Neck.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files. enter Diffuser Legend. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. For View. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 10 Using the same method. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Floor Plan. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click OK. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser.

14 In the drawing area. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 21 Press Esc. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 24 Select the component’s break line.DROP and its text note. 26 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and then press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .RISE symbol for the copy start point.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 333 . enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 34 Using the method learned previously. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and text. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. A drafting view using detail components. 335 .Detailing 15 In this lesson. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.113 East elevation view. A detail callout that references another view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. detail groups. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.

place Power Riser . 8 Using the same method. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 5 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. select each of the 2 panelboards. clear Leader.113 East on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar. and then modify and align the views. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. and click to place it.

Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click. giving the appearance of a single view.9 Press Esc. under Identity Data. right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. for Title on Sheet. and click OK. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.

Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 22 Press Esc. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and click Activate View. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 21 Using the drag control. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . In the New Subcategory dialog. Under Modify Subcategories. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. In the Line Styles dialog. enter Electrical Power. for Line Weight. and then click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . as shown. expand Lines. and click OK. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click New. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. select 6. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Chain is selected. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. As you draw. notice that there are no snaps active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name.rvt.113 North view.

10 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 1/8". 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. 11 Using the same method.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 28 Click above the cap. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 29 Click Modify. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar.31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Press Esc. enter 3/32". enter 0 0. 39 Move the cursor to the right.5. 42 On the Options Bar. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.36 Press Esc. for Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter. and then press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .

Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. select all 3 lines. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. you can ensure that they stay together. 50 With the group selected. enter Ground. for Name.25. and then press Esc. 47 In the drawing area. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .125. and press Enter. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Press Esc. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. enter 0 0. click on the length dimension value. while pressing Ctrl. 46 In the Project Browser. and click OK. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Using the same method.

51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 52 Select the detail group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. TP-2B. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.

and click OK. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. for Name. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 Zoom in to view the section. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 2 Right-click the copy. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i.rvt. In later exercises. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Rename. and will place it on sheet E01. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

and Left sides converge. Back. and then click the corner where the Top. 7 On the ViewCube. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .6 Select the section box. and then press Esc. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. click Home.

350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Apply View Template. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Walkthroughs. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click OK. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Under Names. select 3D HVAC Iso. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. right-click. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. select 3D Views.

as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and click to specify the second leader point. 19 Complete the text labels. (Right). 15 Using the same method.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor down and to the left. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Typical. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and under Extents. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Crop Region Visible. 25 Click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. as shown. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. under Extents.To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.

enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and click Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). For Scale. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View.29 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a detail component. click Training Files. right-click the view name. Use detail lines to create a detail group.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" = 1'-0". Click OK. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Project Browser. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the isometric view. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.

For View Classification. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Plumbing. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. as shown. click the point at the top of the drain. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Click OK. 13 In the drawing area. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. for Sub-Discipline. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 12 On the Element panel. select Documentation. as the rectangle start point.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region.

I. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. for Type. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.P. and then press Esc. 18 With the filled region still selected. 20 Select 1. and click OK. (Line). Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Concrete. 22 Click Modify. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the filled region. select C. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click to select them. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point.28 Click Modify. 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. select Multiple. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

Drafting Detail Components | 357 .38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 45 Using the method learned previously. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle). as shown.

Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. press Tab to highlight the chain. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 49 Click Modify. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and then click to select them.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown. and click OK.D. as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group. enter Flashing Membrane_F. for Name.

Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 61 Using the same method. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.55 Press Esc.

67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region. and then click OK. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 64 Press Esc twice. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select Leader and Free End. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 72 If necessary.62 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 71 Click Modify. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.

Drafting Detail Components | 361 . click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 76 To select the leader start point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the second leader point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and click to specify the text insertion point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 80 Press Esc twice. 81 Select the text note.

82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 88 In the drawing area. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc.

expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.rvt. select 3.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. for Line Weight. Click Open. Click OK. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. For Layers. select Black and White. For Import units. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. you import a CAD detail drawing.dwg. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select Visible. select Auto-Detect. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For A-----NPP. For Colors. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. click Training Files. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.

13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 11 Press Esc. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 12 In the drawing area.8 Type ZF. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. select the viewport title. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.

366 .